Samsung | SMASUNG PL20 | Samsung PL121 صارف گائیڈ

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Samsung‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺸﮑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ä‬ﺭﻭی ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪User Manual‬‬
‫‪PL20/PL21‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ—ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﺳﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﻳﻤﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺘﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣/‬ﻓﻮﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ—ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ ،AC‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺩی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ AC‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‪ (ക‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Mac‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Apple Corporation‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪٣۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫"‪ "OpenSourceInfo.pdf‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫] [‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫) (‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫"ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی" ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫←‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪(EV̶ΘγΩΕέϮλϪΑ̶ϫΩέϮϧϢϴψϨΗ‬‬
‫‪έΩΪϧϮη̮ϳέΎΗ̶ϠϴΧΎϳϦηϭέ̶ϠϴΧΎϫβ̰ϋΖγ΍Ϧ̰ϤϣˬςϴΤϣέϮϧΕΪηϪΑϪΘδΑ‬‬
‫‪Ϊϳήϴ̴Α̵ήΘϬΑβ̰ϋΎΗΪϴϨ̯ϢϴψϨΗ΍έ̶ϫΩέϮϧΪϴϧ΍ϮΗ̶ϣΩέ΍ϮϣϦϳ΍‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪،DIS ،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Contrast Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫‪) Auto Exposure Bracket‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪) Auto Focus‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪) Digital Image Stabilisation‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪) Digital Print Order Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪) Exposure Value‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬
‫‪International Organization for Standardization‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺳﺎﺯی(‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪ήΗ̮ϳέΎΗ‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪(˹̶ΜϨΧ‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪ήΗϦηϭέ‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫● ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫● ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﯽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ )ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ً‬
‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶٢‬‬
‫ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺷﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۶‬‬
‫● ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴۶‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ < ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ < ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ( ‪۴٠ e‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۴٣ e‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ < ﺷﺐ ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ < ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ‪٣٩ e‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ‪۴٠ e‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ‪۴٠ e‬‬
‫‪) EV‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ( ‪۴۶ e‬‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ‪۴۶ e‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ‪۴٧ e‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ( ‪۴٩ e‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫● ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ( ‪۵٠ e‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ( ‪۵١ e‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫● ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴٩ e‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٣١ e‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ < ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ‪٣٠ e‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ( ‪۴١ e‬‬
‫● ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ( ‪۴٧ e‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۵۴ e‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪۵۶ e‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪۵٧ e‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪۶۴ e‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪۶۵ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٧۵ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٧۵ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٧۶ e‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪٧۶ e‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٧۶ e‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪٩٠ e‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪............................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪....................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪.................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ‪.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪.....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ‪......................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪.................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪........................................................ DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪.....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪........................................‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪............................................................ ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ‪............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪....................................... (EV‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪............................................ (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ‪.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ‪.......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪.................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣۵‬‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪۴٠‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫‪۴٣‬‬
‫‪۴٣‬‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫‪۴۵‬‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٩‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪........................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪.............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪.........................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪................................................ (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪.................................. Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ‪.............‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪................................. (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪........................... Mac‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪........................... (PictBridge‬‬
‫‪۵٢‬‬
‫‪۵٣‬‬
‫‪۵٣‬‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫‪۵٨‬‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫‪۶٢‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫‪۶۴‬‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫‪۶٧‬‬
‫‪۶٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪٧۴‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۵‬‬
‫‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٧٩ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪٨٠ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٨١ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٨١ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٨٢ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٨۴ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪٨۶ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪٩٠ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٩٣ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ‪٩۶ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ‪١٠١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ………………………………………………… ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………………………… ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫…………………………………… ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ …………………………… ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ………………………………………………… ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫……………………………………………… ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ …………………………………………………… ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی …………………………………………………… ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ …………………………………………………… ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ………………………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ …………………………………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ………………………………………………………… ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ……………………………………………………… ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ………………………………………………………… ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ……………………………… ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﮐﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫● ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪SMART‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ / ،‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ"‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪A/V‬‬
‫)ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫● ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫● ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻟﻮﮔﻮی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫● ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﺳﺒﺰ‪:‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ]‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪Language :‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ :/01/01‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪yyyy mm dd‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Time Zone 䚐ạ㛨‬‬
‫‪Date/Time SetFrançais‬‬
‫‪Date Type Deutsch‬‬
‫‪2011/ 01/01 12:00‬‬
‫‪Español‬‬
‫‪Italiano‬‬
‫ﻢﻴﻈﻨﺗ‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ‪] ،‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪Language :‬‬
‫ﻥﺪﻨﻟ ‪:‬ﯽﻧﺎﻣﺯ ﻪﻘﻄﻨﻣ‬
‫‪:11/01/01‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻢﻴﻈﻨﺗ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺪﻥ‬
‫‪[GMT +00:00] 2011/01/01 12:00‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻬﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٧‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫پ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫پ‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ(‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﻗﺮﻣﺰ( ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ )]‬
‫[‪] ,‬‬
‫[ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪] ،‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫[‪] ,‬‬
‫[‪] ,‬‬
‫[( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ P‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻈﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫]‬
‫]‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫)ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ( ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣/٢/١‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢۵‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ )ﺯﻭﻡ( ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮑﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۴‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺟﻠﻮی ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫)ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۶‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی …………………………………………… ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ …………………………………… ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ …………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪……………………………………………… DIS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ……………………………………………‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ………………………………………………………‬
‫……………………………… ‪٢٩‬‬
‫…………………………………………… ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ……………………………………………… ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ……………………………………………… ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………………… ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [SMART‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﮕﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ)ﻣﺜﻼ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‬
‫ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ← ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ( ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪] ،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ←‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ« ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪DIS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ ،(DIS‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ‪ DIS‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪) DIS‬ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪۴‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MJPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣۶‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ← ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ← ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ )ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‪] ،‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭی ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ 40 ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ 16‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺻﺪﺍ ← ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ …………………………‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ………………………‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ………………………………‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ……………………………‬
‫‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ………………………………‬
‫‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ………………………………‬
‫‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ …………………………………‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ …………………………‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ …………………………‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫……………‬
‫………………………‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫………………………………‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪………………… (ACB‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ……………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ……………‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ………………………‬
‫‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ……………………………‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵٠‬‬
‫‪۵١‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪…………………………… ISO‬‬
‫‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ……………………………‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫……………………‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ……………………………‬
‫‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ …………………………………‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ …………………………‬
‫‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ………………………………‬
‫‪۴٣‬‬
‫‪۴۶‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :1280 X 720‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.HDTV‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :640 X 480‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :320 X 240‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ :4320 X 3240‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A١‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4320 X 2880‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A١‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ (٣:٢‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4000 X 3000‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A١‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4320 X 2432‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A٢‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ )‪ (١۶:٩‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :3264 X 2448‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A٣‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2592 X 1944‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A۴‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1984 X 1488‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A۵‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ :1920 X 1080‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ A۵‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ )‪ (١۶:٩‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ :1024 X 768‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٣۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ژﺳﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻑ ‪ ۶‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﻮﺕ )‪ ٣‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ »ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ« ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﻮﺕ )‪ ٣‬ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫● ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺴﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [ ] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ) ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ*‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪:.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ*‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺭﻳﺰی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺳﺎﺯی )‪ (ISO‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ‪ ← ISO‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ( ﺩﺭ ”ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [ ] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١۵٫٧‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ۴٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣١٫۵‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫)‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣٩‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫)‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣١٫۵‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪٨٠ - ۵‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ( ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣٩‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﮥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ‬‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺳﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻴﭗ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﭗ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪).‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۵‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ← ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ”ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ“ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ”ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ“‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(ACB‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ" )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ACB‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ‪.EV‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) AEB ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۵٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ACB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ‪ ← ACB‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ACB :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ACB :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ,‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪ AEB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ACB‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ,‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﮐﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﮐﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬
‫)ﺍﺑﺮی(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٧‬‬
‫)ﺭﻭﺯ(‬
‫)ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮی‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺑﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :H-‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ :L-‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺠﺶ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ← ﺳﻨﺠﺶ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ژﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭ ‪ ACB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ VGA‬ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﮑﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪VGA‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ )‪ ۶‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ؛ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪:AEB‬‬
‫● ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ← ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫● ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :-‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ :+‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫● ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ٠ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﭼﺎپ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪۵١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ……………………… ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ………………………………‬
‫‪۵٣‬‬
‫………………………………‬
‫‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ …… ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ……………………………………‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ………………………………………‬
‫‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪۶٧ ………… Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ……………………………‬
‫‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ………………………………‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ……………………………… ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٧٠ ………… (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ……………………………‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ …………………………………‬
‫‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪٧١ …… Mac‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ …………………………‬
‫‪۶١‬‬
‫………………………‬
‫‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪…………………… (DPOF‬‬
‫‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪٧٢ …… (PictBridge‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ -‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ٩‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ← ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ← ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪] ،‬‬
‫[‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﮑﯽ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ‪] ،‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﺣﺬﻑ ← ﻫﻤﻪ ← ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵۶‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪] ،‬‬
‫[‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ← ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪] ،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ]‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪] ،‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫]‬
‫[‬
‫]‬
‫]‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ← ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫)ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪] ،‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫]‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۶‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪90°‬‬
‫‪1984 × 1488‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ← ‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :-‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ :+‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪/‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ‪/‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ‪ ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :-‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ‪ :+‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ← ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ ،DPOF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ DPOF ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪,‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ← ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪,‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ← ‪ ← DPOF‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ← ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ DPOF 1.1‬ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ← ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،A/V‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﭘﯽ ﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﺭﻡ )‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢ ،۴ Intel Pentium‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫۶ AMD Athlon™ FX‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪RAM‬‬
‫)ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Windows XP SP2/Vista/7‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢۵٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ATI X1600 series/‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ ٧۶٨ x ١٠٢۴‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ‪ ١۶‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫)‪ ١٠٢۴ x ١٢٨٠‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ،USB‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ‬
‫*ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ 64‬ﺑﻴﺘﯽ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Windows XP‬ﻭ ‪ Vista‬ﻭ ‪ 7‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩٫٠c DirectX‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧/Windows XP/Vista‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ١٠٫۴ Mac OS‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ Samsung Digital Camera Installer‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ‪ Exit‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶۶‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،Intelli-studio‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )▲( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮی ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Picasa‬ﻳﺎ ‪ YouTube‬ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ Help ← Help‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﭙﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪) MP۴ :‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،٢۶۴.H :‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪AVI (MJPEG) ،(٩/٨/٧ AAC)، WMV (WMV :‬‬‫ ﻋﮑﺲ‪JPG، GIF، BMP، PNG، TIFF :‬‬‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک )ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Flickr‬ﻳﺎ ‪ YouTube‬ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )▲( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪←Removable Disk ← My Computer ،‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٠PHOTO ← DCIM‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ٧/Windows Vista‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺸﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪Mac‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Mac OS 10.4‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )▲( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪] ،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ← ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻳﺎ ]‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫ﺑﻪ "ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺎپ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪] .‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪,‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ……………………………………………… ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫………………………………………… ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ……………………………………………………………… ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫………………………………………………………… ‪٧۵‬‬
‫………………………………………………………… ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۶‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٧۴‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪(3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ :‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻋﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻮﮔﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶١‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ*‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 0.5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ*‪ 1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ,‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ )‪ (DST‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ*(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪,‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 0001‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺮی*‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 1 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ 3 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ*‪ 5 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ 10 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪ 100PHOTO ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ SAM_0001 ،‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ SAM_0001‬ﺗﺎ ‪ SAM_9999‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 100PHOTO‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 999PHOTO‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 9999‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ ،(DCF‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻤﺪﺍً ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺣﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫● ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺣﮏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ*(‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :*NTSC‬ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺰﻳﮏ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪) PAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ BDGHI‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮋﻳﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭک‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ*‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ……………………………………………………… ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ………………………………………………… ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ………………………………………………… ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫………………………………………… ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ …………………………………………… ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ……………………………………………………… ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ……………………………………… ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ………………………………………………… ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫……………………………………………… ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ………………………………………………… ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑُﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺧﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﻧﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺜﻴﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﺪ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ژﻝ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﮑﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻇﺮﻳﻔﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی‬
‫ﺷﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺶ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺮﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺵ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺰﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺭﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺰﺷﮏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ١ SD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ ،(Secure Digital) SD‬ﻳﺎ ‪SDHC‬‬
‫)‪ (Secure Digital High Capacity‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ )ﺟﻠﻮ(‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪Normal‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ 24‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ‪ 15‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪٢۴٠ ١٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢٩٢‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢۴٩ ١۵٢‬‬
‫‪٣١٢‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢٨۴ ١۴٧‬‬
‫‪۴٠٣‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢٨٢ ١٧٩‬‬
‫‪٣۵٣‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٣٩١ ٢٣٢‬‬
‫‪۵١٠‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪۵٨٣ ۴١١‬‬
‫‪٨٢٣‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١٠٢٩ ٨۵٨ ۶۴٣‬‬
‫‪١۴٣٧ ١١۴۴ ٨٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ SD‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ SDHC‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪١٩٩٣ ١٧۶۵ ١۵٨۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪ ٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪ ١١ ١۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ٣٧‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪ ٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ۵۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪ ٢۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪١٩‬‬
‫‪ ۴٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ١۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫‪.‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ *‬
‫‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨۴‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎی ﻗﻮی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﮥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪/‬ﺩی ﻭی ﺩی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨۵‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪BP70A‬‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ ٧۴٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪٧٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ*‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ١۵٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٢٢٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ،١۴M‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ *‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ٧٢٠ X ١٢٨٠‬ﻭ ‪ ٢۴‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩۀ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ )ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ١٠۴/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ‪º ٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺧﻨﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‬
‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ )‪ ۵‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ ۵٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺁﻣﭙﺮ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺩﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺮﻭﻭﻳﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻧﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺧﺘﺨﻮﺍﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺘﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰی‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ١۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺪﺭﺍﻝ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﺯﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ( ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺯﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺏ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫● ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٧‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ DCF‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ (.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴١‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫● ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(٧١ ،۶۶‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٨‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٠‬‬
‫● ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩١‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۶۶‬‬
‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫● ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ← ‪Start‬‬
‫‪All Programs ← Samsung ← Intelli‬‬‫‪ studio← Intelli-studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‬
‫‪ ٢٫٣/١ CCD‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٧٫٧٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١۴٫٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١۴٫۵٨‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ٨ - ١⁄٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫● ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ١ - ١⁄٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫● ﺷﺐ‪ ٨ - ١⁄٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫‪ AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢EV±‬ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎی )‪(٣EV/١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪١۶٠٠ ،٨٠٠ ،۴٠٠ ،٢٠٠ ،١٠٠ ،٨٠ ،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ = ‪ ٢۴٫۵ - ۴٫٩‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‪ ١٣۵ - ٢٧ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫‪) F٣٫۵‬ﻭﺍﻳﺪ( ‪) F۵٫٩ -‬ﺗﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪٣٫٠X ~ ١٫٠X :‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ١٣٫۵ - ١٫٠ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬
‫‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫ﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ۶٫٩‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‪٢٣٠K ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪ AF) TTL‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ AF ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ AF ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻳﺪ )‪(W‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ )‪(T‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١۵٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫● ﻭﺍﻳﺪ‪ ٠٫٢ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٫۶٣‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫● ﺗﻠﻪ‪ ٠٫۵ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٫۵۶‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ ISO‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی(‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫‪) Effect‬ﺍﻓﮑﺖ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫● ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪ RGB ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪:‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‪,‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ_‪ ،H‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ_‪ ،L‬ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪) Effect‬ﺍﻓﮑﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫● ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮐﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،DIS ،‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫)ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ(‬
‫● ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﭘﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪AEB ،‬‬
‫● ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪) MJPEG :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ 2 :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ٢۴) ١٢٨٠x٧٢٠ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ ٣٠) ۶۴٠x۴٨٠ ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ١۵ ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ ٣٠) ٣٢٠x٢۴٠ ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١۵‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ٢۴ ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ١۵ ،‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ(‪ :‬ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٩‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی(‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SD‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SDHC‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫* ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈ ِﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫● ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،١٫١ DPOF ،٢٫٢١ JPEG (DCF)، EXIF :‬‬
‫‪١٫٠ PictBridge‬‬
‫● ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪AVI (MJPEG) :‬‬
‫● ﺻﺪﺍ‪WAV :‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫* ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫● ‪) Smart Filter‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪RGB ،‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،ACB :‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ SD‬ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ‪ ٧٤٠ ،BP70A :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫)ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ ٧٠٠ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫‪4320 X 3240‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢۴٠‬‬
‫‪٢٩٢‬‬
‫‪4320 X 2880‬‬
‫‪١۵٢‬‬
‫‪٢۴٩‬‬
‫‪٣١٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4000 X 3000‬‬
‫‪١۴٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨۴‬‬
‫‪۴٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪4320 X 2432‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪٢٨٢‬‬
‫‪٣۵٣‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٫٣ × ۵٨ × ٩۶٫٨‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪3264 X 2448‬‬
‫‪٢٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٩١‬‬
‫‪۵١٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪2592 X 1944‬‬
‫‪۴١١‬‬
‫‪۵٨٣‬‬
‫‪٨٢٣‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٣‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫‪1984 X 1488‬‬
‫‪۶۴٣‬‬
‫‪٨۵٨‬‬
‫‪١٠٢٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪1920 X 1080‬‬
‫‪٨٧٠‬‬
‫‪١١۴۴‬‬
‫‪١۴٣٧‬‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪1024 X 768‬‬
‫‪١۵٨۴‬‬
‫‪١٧۶۵‬‬
‫‪١٩٩٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻂ‬
‫‪٪ ٨۵ - ۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪) NTSC، PAL‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۵‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﻭ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ژﺍﭘﻦ )‪ (JEITA‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺗﺎﺭی(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ DIS‬ﻳﺎ ‪ OIS‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ﺯﻭﻡ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ .‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۶‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) EV‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺯﮔﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ،EV ١٫٠-‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪ EV ١٫٠‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Exif‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ(‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ )‪ (JEIDA‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ(‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ( ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺘﻮﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺘﻮﺳﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪) CCD :‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ( ﻭ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫)ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎی ﻣﮑﻤﻞ ﺍﮐﺴﻴﺪ ﻓﻠﺰی(‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﮐﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ(‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻓﺖ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ JPEG) MJPEG‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮک(‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ CCFL‬ﻳﺎ ‪ LED‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ )‪ (١:١‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻠﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ )‪(Vignetting‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی )ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻠﺐ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﺁﺑﯽ(‪ .‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ(‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ(‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺁﻥ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ (USB‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ‪ Cd ،Hg‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Pb‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺭ ‪EC‬‬
‫‪ ۶۶/٢٠٠۶ Directive‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ ﻋﻮﺩﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺤﻞ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PlanetFirst‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ‪ Samsung Electronic‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ACB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫‪) AF Lamp‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪٧٧ (AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٧١ Mac‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪۶۵ Windows‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫‪۶٢ ACB‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪۶٣ DPOF‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪٨۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪٣١ DIS‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪٧۵ AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪) Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ( ‪٧۶‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪۶٨ Intelli-studio‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪) Scene‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ( ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫‪ MJPEG (JPEG‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮک( ‪٩۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ‪٧۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٧۶‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪٣۴‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۵٨‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪۵۴‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪۶٠‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫برای اطالع از خدمات پس از فروش يا يافتن پاسخ پرسش های خود در اين زمينه‪ ،‬لطفاً به‬
‫ضمانت نامه ای که همراه محصول عرضه شده مراجعه نماييد يا به پايگاه اينترنتی‬
‫‪ http://www.samsung.com/‬برويد‪.‬‬
Download PDF